‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪.1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪.2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪.3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪.4‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫‪.5‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪.6‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬‫‪.7‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫‪.8‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪.9‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪.10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪.11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪.12‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﺘﻊ‬‫ً‬‫ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻭﻋﻤﺮ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪ 1.0‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬‫ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ً‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺁﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ‪ www.olympus-consumer.com/register‬ﻭﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻤﺒﻮﺱ!‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ(‬‫‪CB-AVC3‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫‪CB-USB6‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬‫ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫• ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫• ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪MCG-1‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪(BLS-1) PS-BLS1‬‬‫‪(BCS-1) PS-BCS1‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪BLS-5‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ً‬‫ﻟﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬‫ﻟﺮﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻏﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 2‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺠﻨﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﺳﺘﺴﺎﻋﺪﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪BCS-1‬‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺧﻠﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪30‬‬‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‬‫ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪BLS-1‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،BCS-1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ BLS-5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.BCS-5‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﻟﻼﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻟﺴﺎﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻊ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﺘﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪3 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) Eye-Fi/SDXC/SDHC/SD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ "ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫)ﺹ‪.(9 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ‬‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬‫ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 4‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻳﺪﻝ‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺮﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪5 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺃﺯﺭﻕ( ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.h‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫■ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫■ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫■ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; )ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ‬‫‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪) :‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪AR 6‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪) [d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪5sec‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [d‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [X‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[d‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Time‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪Y/M/D‬‬‫‪Y‬‬‫‪2011‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫‪ 24‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪7 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬
‫‪9‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬

‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬

‫‪a‬‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫‪b‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪h‬‬
‫‪i‬‬

‫‪g‬‬
‫‪d‬‬
‫‪e‬‬
‫‪f‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .......................‬ﺹ‪10 ،6 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪ ................‬ﺹ‪92 ،36 ،12 ،11 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪............................... ON/OFF‬ﺹ‪6 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪......................................Fn2‬ﺹ‪89 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪......................................‬ﺹ‪2 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ ...............................‬ﺹ‪/49 .‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪............................‬ﺹ‪5 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ )ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪68 ،62 .‬‬‫‪AR 8‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪.................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪................................‬ﺹ‪5 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ d‬ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫‪ e‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪..........‬ﺹ‪3 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪............‬ﺹ‪3 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ g‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪ ...................‬ﺹ‪77 ،73 ،69 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪..... (C‬ﺹ‪69 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫‪a‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪c‬‬
‫‪d‬‬

‫‪3‬‬
‫‪e‬‬

‫‪90‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫‪45678‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) F‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ‪) F/‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(40 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪) I‬ﻳﻤﻴﻦ(‪) #/‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(59 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ* )‪(j‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(53 – 50 ،14 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) H‬ﻳﺴﺎﺭ(‪/‬‬‫‪) P‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫)ﺹ‪(37 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Q‬ﺹ‪(21 ،20 .‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) G‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ( ‪) jY/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ( )ﺹ‪(49 .‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪71 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ( ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪25 ،24 ،22 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ(‪ ........‬ﺹ‪89 ،65 ،61 ،13 ،11 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ...................... U‬ﺹ‪64 ،63 ،38 ،33 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ...............G/Fn1‬ﺹ‪/89 .‬ﺹ‪64 ،63 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ .............‬ﺹ‪63 ،14 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) D‬ﻣﺴﺢ(‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪63 ،15 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪................................ MENU‬ﺹ‪21 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪..............................‬ﺹ‪4 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪....................................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬‫‪ ..............................‬ﺹ‪34 – 32 ،25 ،24 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪ d‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ* )‪.........(j‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 ،14 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.............................‬ﺹ‪2 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ* )‪.........(j‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 ،14 .‬‬‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪ j‬ﻭ ‪ j‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪9 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫■ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬

‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ )ﺹ‪(50 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ‪(51 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺹ‪(52 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )ﺹ‪(53 .‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﻜﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫■ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺹ‪(61 .‬‬‫■ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫‪) iAUTO A‬ﺹ‪(18 .‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )ﺹ‪(16 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )ﺹ‪(17 .‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،A‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ً SCN‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v :‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪(35 .‬‬‫‪AR 10‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ ART‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ SCN‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ]‪.[nMode‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫• ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ :‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪/BULB/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/3D/PANORAMA/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫)ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ(‬‫‪11 AR‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻌﻴﻖ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‬‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪UNLOCK‬‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (1‬ﻟﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪.(2‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪(4‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.(3) UNLOCK‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )( ﺃﻭ ‪ (n‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫(‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ*‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫* ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 12‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‬‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ "ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ" ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‬‫"ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ( ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ"‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ" )ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ( ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ )ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،q‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬‫]‪" v :[Sleep‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺿﺒﺎﺏ‬‫ﻣﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪13 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪q‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪100-0004‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪ r‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .×14‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ‪ q‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪2011.5‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪10‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪21‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Movie Play‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Movie Play‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 14‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .D‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(65 .‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Yes‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪D‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn2‬؛ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪) 0‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪" v .‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(65 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.ART‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫ً‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ART‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ I‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ II‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ*‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﻧﺠﻮﻡ‬‫* ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻠﺤﻮﻇﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ "ﺣﺒﻴﺒﻴﺔ"‪،‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻻﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺸﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 16‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫• ﺳﺘُﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺸﻬ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬‫‪Portrait O‬‬‫‪e-Portrait P‬‬‫‪Landscape L‬‬‫‪Landscape+Portrait K‬‬‫‪Sport J‬‬‫‪Night Scene G‬‬‫‪Night+Portrait U‬‬‫‪Children G‬‬‫‪High Key H‬‬‫‪Low Key I‬‬‫‪DIS Mode q‬‬‫‪Macro J‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Nature Macro r‬‬‫‪Candle Q‬‬‫‪Sunset R‬‬‫‪Documents T‬‬‫‪) Panorama s‬ﺹ‪(54 .‬‬‫( ‪Fireworks‬‬‫‪Beach & Snow g‬‬‫‪n Fisheye Effect f‬‬‫‪n Wide-angle w‬‬‫‪n Macro m‬‬‫‪3D Photo T‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[e-Portrait‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻭﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ]‪[e-Portrait‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪) JPEG‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ‪.((2560 × 1920) X‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ]‪ [n Fisheye Effect‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Wide-angle‬ﻭ ]‪ [n Macro‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ]‪ [e-Portrait‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3D Photo‬‬‫‪17 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ .(A) iAUTO‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ iAUTO‬ﻭﺿﻌًﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻬﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻣﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ً‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫& ‪Clear‬‬‫‪Vivid‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫‪Change Color Image‬‬‫‪Warm‬‬‫‪Cool‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫‪Change Brightness‬‬‫‪Bright‬‬‫‪Dark‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺗﺪﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫‪Blur Background‬‬‫‪Blur‬‬‫‪Sharp‬‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫‪Express Motions‬‬‫‪Blurred‬‬‫‪*Motion‬‬‫‪Stop Motion‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)‪ 1/2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ – ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ(‬‫ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫‪Shooting Tips‬‬‫• ‪Tips For Child Photo‬‬‫• ‪Tips For Pet Photo‬‬‫• ‪Tips For Flower Photo‬‬‫• ‪Tips For Cuisine Photo‬‬‫• ‪Tips For Framing‬‬‫• ‪Tips With Accessory‬‬‫* ﻳﺒﻄﺊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 18‬‬

‫‪0‬‬

‫—‬

‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫‪GF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Change Color Saturation‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ GF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Shooting Tips‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [Blur Background‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Express Motions‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪Clear & Vivid‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪Flat & Muted‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [YN+RAW‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺒﻌﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ .Fn1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪” v :[Button Function] .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪19 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪ .n‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﺹ‪.(81 .‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬‫ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪.........................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ*‪..................................... 1‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ*‪....................................... 2‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ*‪.............................. 2‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪......................................... 3* n‬ﺹ‪61 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪................................‬ﺹ‪43 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪..................‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ*‪...................... 2*1‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.......................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‪..................................... 2*1‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ*‪........................... 2*1‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ*‪..................................... 2*1‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪...............................‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪........................................ISO‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ*‪..................................... 2*1‬ﺹ‪39 .‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪ M‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫*‪ ART 2‬ﻭ‪ SCN‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ n‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ GF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ‬‫ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ 8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪:[KControl Settings] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪AR 20‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫‪ W‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬‫‪ X‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪ q‬ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ*‬‫‪ #‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ*‬‫‪ d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫* ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪MENU‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪w‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪j Off‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪Y12s‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Y2s Off‬‬‫‪w‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻙ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻓﻚ ﻭﺫﻭﻗﻚ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ EVF‬ﻭ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪21 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ )‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫(‬
‫‪14‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪5x‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ E‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1x‬‬‫‪AR 22‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫• ﺣﺮﻙ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ F‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ‬‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‬‫• ﻣﺮﺭ ﺇﺻﺒﻌﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ t‬ﺃﻭ ‪ u‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ u‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪/3D/e-portrait/multiple exposure/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪/bulb‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪/‬ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻇﺎﻓﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﺷﻴﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪" v :[Touch Screen Settings] .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪23 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪678 9‬‬‫‪0 ab‬‬‫‪45 mm‬‬‫‪c 1‬‬‫‪dj‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫‪g 3‬‬‫‪h N‬‬
‫‪i‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪k‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪FP RC BKT‬‬‫‪IS 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪+7‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪-3‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1023‬‬

‫‪l‬‬

‫‪z‬‬
‫‪y‬‬
‫‪x‬‬
‫‪w‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪u‬‬

‫‪m‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.......................‬ﺹ‪8 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪....................Super FP s‬ﺹ‪105 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ‪......................................RC‬ﺹ‪93 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.......................... t‬ﺹ‪57 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪...............a‬ﺹ‪56 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ ........................ I‬ﺹ‪82 ،39 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪62 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬‫‪..................................... m‬ﺹ‪97 .‬‬‫‪...................................... dLock 9‬ﺹ‪82 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪........................‬ﺹ‪100 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪...........................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪،‬‬‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‪ٍ :‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء‪ :‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻠﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫‪ b‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪...................‬ﺹ‪12 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪16 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪17 .‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪43 .‬‬‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.............‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ( ‪...............‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ‪.........................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ‬‫‪ k‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪...........‬ﺹ‪106 .‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ" )ﺹ‪(32 .‬‬‫‪AR 24‬‬‫‪1 2345‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪t‬‬
‫‪s‬‬

‫‪rq p‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.......................‬ﺹ‪34 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ :‬ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪....‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪..............‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪33 ،32 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.........u‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪....................‬ﺹ‪55 – 50 ،10 .‬‬‫‪........................................ Myset t‬ﺹ‪35 .‬‬‫‪ u‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪.............................‬ﺹ‪22 .‬‬‫‪ v‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ w‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.................................. ISO‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ x‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫‪ y‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪....................................‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ z‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ A‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫; ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫)ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﺸﺮﺓ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬‫‪ :‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫] ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‪ :‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫‪ B‬ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .................‬ﺹ‪22 ،18 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣُﺒﺴﻂ‬‫‪gh‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪×10‬‬

‫‪i‬‬
‫‪j‬‬
‫‪k‬‬
‫‪l‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪n‬‬
‫‪o‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬

‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪+1.0‬‬‫‪G+4‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪A+4‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪3D 4:3 L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪e‬‬

‫‪d‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪ba 0‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪6 .‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻛﺘﻤﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ‪........................ Eye-Fi‬ﺹ‪88 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ‪................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪.................................‬ﺹ‪68 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ‪..........................................‬ﺹ‪15 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪65 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ................................‬ﺹ‪86 ،76 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪......................................‬ﺹ‪76 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪99 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ..............‬ﺹ‪67 ،48 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪..................................... 3D‬ﺹ‪55 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪7 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.......................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪srqp‬‬‫‪t‬‬‫‪ f‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪....................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 ،10 .‬‬‫‪ g‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪....................‬ﺹ‪40 .‬‬‫‪ h‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .........................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ i‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ........................‬ﺹ‪53 – 50 .‬‬‫‪ j‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ‪........................‬ﺹ‪100 .‬‬‫‪ k‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ l‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫‪ m‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫‪ n‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ o‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ p‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪............................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ q‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.................................. ISO‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ r‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪43 .‬‬‫‪ s‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪....................................‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ t‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ..........................‬ﺹ‪33 ،32 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪456‬‬‫‪2 3‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫‪" v‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ" )ﺹ‪(33 .‬‬‫‪25 AR‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫)‪iAUTO (A‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫‪48‬‬‫ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺳﻮﺩﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪40‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ً‬‫ﺇﺣﺴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪/‬ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪18‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪52‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ )‪(ART‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪43‬‬‫‪44‬‬‫‪45‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪37‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪) C-AF+TR‬ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪37‬‬‫‪36‬‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ISO/DIS Mode‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Anti-Shock‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)‪Gradation (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ )‪(SCN‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫‪17/48‬‬‫‪42‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫‪49‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪59‬‬‫‪45‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫‪85‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻄﺨﺎﺕ(‬‫‪AR 26‬‬‫‪51‬‬

‫)‪Gradation (Picture Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‪/‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫‪Level Gauge‬‬‫)‪(G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪Displayed Grid‬‬‫)‪(G/Info Settings‬‬‫)‪Autoq (Rec View‬‬‫)‪mode2 (q Close Up Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪49‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫‪49‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪47‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻤﺪ‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ‬‫‪40/32‬‬‫‪34‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫‪83‬‬‫‪40 ،32‬‬‫‪51‬‬‫‪89‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪45‬‬‫‪83‬‬‫‪83‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫‪84‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫‪69‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫‪66‬‬‫ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‬‫)‪Shadow Adj (JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪67‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫)‪Redeye Fix (JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪67‬‬‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫‪77‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﺑﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫‪Myset‬‬‫‪35‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫‪W‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫‪27 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪3 .........................‬‬‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ‪3 .........................‬‬‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪4 ......................‬‬‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫‪26‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬‬‫‪32‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪5 ...........................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪32 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪6 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪32 ..............‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪7 .............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪33 ..........‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ‪8 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪34 ..................INFO‬‬‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪8 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪10 ...................‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪12 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪35 ...‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪35 ...............‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪35 ............................... MYSET‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪35 ........................... MYSET‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪12 ...‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪36 ....‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪14 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪37 .....‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ‪37 ....................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ‪16 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ‪17 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪18 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪20 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪21 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ‪22 ..........................‬‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪23‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪24 ..............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪24 ........................................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪25 ..................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪37 ..........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪37 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪38 .......................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪39 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪39 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‪40 .....................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪40 .....................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ‪40 .............................................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ( ‪41 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪41 ............................................‬‬‫‪AR 28‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪43 .............‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪44 ................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪59 ................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪44 ...........‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪60 .........................‬‬‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪47 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪60 .......................‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ‪48 ...............‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪60 ................‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪48 .................................... ISO‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪45 ...............‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪47 ...........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪49 .....‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪50‬‬‫"ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ"‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ّ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪50 .............................. (P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪51 .................(A‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪52 ..................... (S‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪53 ..............................(M‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء(‪53 ....‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪61 ..................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪61 ......................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪62 ..................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪62 ......................................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪63‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪63 ......................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪63 ...................‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ( ‪64 ........................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪54 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪65 .......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ‪54 ......‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪65 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪55 ..............................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪65 ...............................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‪56 ......................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪65 .............................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‪57 ................‬‬‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ‪58 .......‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪42 ............‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪59‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪66 ....................................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪67 ..............................‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪68 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪68 ....................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪69 ................‬‬‫‪29 AR‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪71 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ‪71 ....................‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ‪72 ..............................‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪72 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪73 OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫‪73 ...................................Windows‬‬‫‪74 ................................. Macintosh‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ]‪75 .....OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪76‬‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪76 .........................(DPOF‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪76 ............................‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪77 ..............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪77 ............ (PictBridge‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪78 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪78 ............................‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪81 .......................................‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪81 .......................‬‬‫‪81 .................................. R AF/MF‬‬‫‪82 ........................... S Button/Dial‬‬‫‪83 ................................T Release‬‬‫‪83 .........................U DISP/8/PC‬‬‫‪84 ......................... V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫‪85 .............................W #Custom‬‬‫‪85 .......................X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪86 .......................Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪87 ................................... Z Movie‬‬‫‪88 ..............................b K Utility‬‬‫‪88 ................................... AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪،V Function ،U Function‬‬‫‪89 ............................R Function‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ ‪90 .....................‬‬‫‪90 ...A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪90 ...B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪90 ........... C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫‪80‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪91 .....................‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪80 .......................................‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪92 ...........‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪80 ....................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪92 .....................................‬‬‫‪) i‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪80 ..................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪93 ..........................‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪80 .................‬‬‫‪80 .................................. Rec View‬‬‫‪80 ..................c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪80 .................................. Firmware‬‬‫‪AR 30‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪81‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪94 ...................‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪96 ........................................‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪107 ......................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‪111 .......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪98 .........................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪98 ................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪98 .........................................‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‪113 .................................‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪98 ......................................‬‬‫‪120‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪98 ..............................‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫‪113‬‬‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪94‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪106 .........................‬‬‫‪122‬‬‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪99 ..................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪99 ...........................‬‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪99 ...................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪100 ...............................‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ‪100 .........‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪100 .........................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪101 ............................................‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪102 ............................‬‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪102 ...............................‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪102 ................(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪102 ..............................‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ )‪102 ........... (MAL-1‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪102 ....... (SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪102 .........(VF-2‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪102 ...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪103 .........................‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪104 ...................................‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪105 .................‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪105 ..........................‬‬‫‪31 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫*‪1‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪+0.7‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪+0.3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪WB/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[LV-Info] < [G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[LV-Info] < [G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ [KControl Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪.(81 .‬‬‫‪SCN/ART‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪Portrait‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪mall‬‬‫‪Super Fine +RAW‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪36‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ*‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪mall‬‬‫‪Super Fine +RAW‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪36‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ*‬‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[KControl Settings‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ*‬‫‪M/S/A/P‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪AR 32‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪-0.3‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪F5.6‬‬‫‪45mm‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪+2.0‬‬‫‪±0.0‬‬‫‪A±10‬‬‫‪ISO 400‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ*‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ‪(25 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ )ﺹ‪(25 .‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪×10‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ*‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Shadow Highlight‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ*‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ*‬‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪" v .[q Info] < [G/Info Settings‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪" v :[Histogram Settings] .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬‫ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺟﻨﺒًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻨﺐ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [G/Info Settings‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [mode2‬ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬‫]‪" v .[q Close Up Mode‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺃﻭ ‪.U‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫‪U‬‬

‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪54‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪G±10‬‬‫‪Adobe‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪33 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪INFO‬‬‫ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ‪.(44 .‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬

‫‪j‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Capture WB‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪2 CWB‬‬‫ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪.(43 .‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Kelvin‬‬‫‪5400 K‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2 CWB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪WB‬‬‫ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .F‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .F‬ﺑﻌﺪﺋﺬ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪" v .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ" )ﺹ‪(40 .‬‬‫‪IS 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻤﻮﺯﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ IS‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ HIGF‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪" v .‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(" )ﺹ‪(42 .‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ .INFO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪1234‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Delete all pictures in the‬‬‫‪Picture‬‬‫‪Modecard or format j‬‬‫‪memory‬‬‫‪D the memory card.‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 34‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪) W‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻇﻠﻞ ]‪ [Full‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(107 .‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﻔﻆ ‪MYSET‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) W‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ )]‪ ([Myset4] – [Myset1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺤﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺎﺕ )]‪ ([Myset4] – [Myset1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Reset‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪:Reset‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫‪:Myset‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .M‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ :Quick Myset‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .R‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ" )ﺹ‪(107 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪MYSET‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset/Myset‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪W‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ )]‪([Myset4]–[Myset1‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Basic‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Reset‬‬‫‪Myset1‬‬‫‪Myset2‬‬‫‪Myset3‬‬‫‪Myset4‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪35 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‬‫‪MF‬‬‫)ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪S-AF+MF‬‬‫)ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬‫‪C-AF+TR‬‬‫)ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫‪Single AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪TR‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪S-AF C-AF MF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺪﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﻜﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺻﻔﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫)‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ؛ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪﺋ ٍﺬ ﺑﺘﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺿﻊ ً‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[S-AF‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪) [Rls Priority S‬ﺹ‪ (83 .‬ﻭ]‪) [Rls Priority C‬ﺹ‪ (83 .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‬‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [MF Assist‬ﺹ‪ (82 .‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ]‪) [Focus Ring‬ﺹ‪ (82 .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺠﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 36‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ )ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ً 35‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (H) P‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.AF‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[S-AF‬ﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ" ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬‫‪1‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ Fn1/Fn2‬ﺃﻭ ‪.R‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪.(82 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [U Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [V Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [R Function‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪" v :[Button Function‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1/Fn2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ]‪.[MF‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [U Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [V Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [R Function‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪" v :[Button Function‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪37 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪U/Q‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ(‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫‪U‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫×‪5‬‬‫×‪7‬‬‫×‪10‬‬‫×‪14‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 38‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪ (ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫‪iL‬‬‫‪Face Priority Off J‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Face Priority On‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪I‬‬‫‪Face & Eye‬‬‫‪Priority On K‬‬‫‪Face & R. Eye‬‬‫‪Priority On L‬‬‫‪Face & L. Eye‬‬‫‪Priority On M‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪iR‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪i‬‬

‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺆﺑﺆ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺣﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1023‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) p‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ([‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[MF‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪.‬‬‫‪39 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ )"‪ ("+‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ )"–"( ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑـ ‪.EV ±3‬‬‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ )‪(+‬‬‫ﺳﺎﻟﺐ )–(‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ )‪(0‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪" v [EV Step]: .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SCN‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻗﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪[Multi View] < [G/Info Settings‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪.(81 .‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪+0.7‬‬‫‪+0.3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ART‬ﺃﻭ ‪ SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪.n‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪-0.3‬‬‫‪WB/‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪(F) F‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ . INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫"ﻋﺎﻝ" ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ "ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ" ﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ٍ‬‫‪IS 1‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪AR 40‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪+1‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪1234‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪p‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‬‫‪H‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬‫‪I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫‪IHI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪-‬‬‫‪ISH‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪ESP‬‬‫‪SH‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪HI‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ‪ 324‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪ [OFF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ([I Face Priority‬ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﺎ‬‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ً‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 2%‬ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .R‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ‪ AFL/AEL‬ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[U Function‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.[R Function‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ B‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:[AEL/AFL Memo] .‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪:[AEL Metering] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪41 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Focal Length‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪IS Off J‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪e‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪f‬‬‫‪Vertical IS‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ )‪ (Y‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪g‬‬‫‪Horizontal IS‬‬‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ )‪ (Z‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Four Thirds/Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Four Thirds‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫)ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 8‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻭ‪ 1,000‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪mm‬‬‫‪50‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻤﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[OFF‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 42‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﻞ‬‫]‪ [AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺘﻌﻤﺪ ﻟﻸﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪LF‬‬‫‪WB Auto‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻏﻠﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺟﺰء‬‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬‫ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫‪AUTO‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪5300K‬‬‫‪N‬‬‫‪7500K‬‬‫ﺻﺎﻑ‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ‬
‫ٍ‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫‪6000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻣﻠﺒﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪3000K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‬‫>‬‫‪4000K‬‬‫ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺄﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪5500K‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫)ﺹ‪(44 .‬‬‫‪P/Q‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪CWB‬‬‫‪– 2000K‬‬‫‪14000K‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،INFO‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪HI‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻦ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ‪) K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﻭﺳﻨﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻟﻮﺍ ًﻧﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ؛ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪43 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎَ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [WB‬ﻓﻲ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪ (81 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.X‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) A‬ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺰﺭﻕ(‬‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ" )ﺣﻤﺮﺍء(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻓﺘﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﺮﻭﺩﺓ" )ﺯﺭﻗﺎء(‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬
‫‪G‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪-5‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪) G‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻣﺨﻀﺮ(‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺧﻀﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪WB Preview‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.R‬‬‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪" v :[All >] .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ"‬‫)ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﻗﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻋﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [P‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Q‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻇﻼﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺿﻊ ً‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻛﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺘﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺧﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ "WB NG Retry‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪AR 44‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫‪i-Enhance h‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺜﻴﺮ ﻟﻺﻋﺠﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Vivid i‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Natural j‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Muted Z‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Portrait a‬‬‫‪Monotone‬‬‫‪Custom‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺃﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺳﺠﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ّ‬‫‪Pop Art j‬‬‫‪Soft Focus k‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color l‬‬‫‪Light Tone m‬‬‫‪Grainy Film n‬‬‫‪Pin Hole o‬‬‫‪Diorama s‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Picture Mode‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪W‬‬‫)ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 1‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Reset/Myset‬‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪Image Aspect‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Cross Process t‬‬‫‪Gentle Sepia u‬‬‫‪Dramatic Tone v‬‬‫‪45 AR‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪h‬‬‫‪a–i‬‬

‫‪J‬‬

‫‪K‬‬

‫‪Contrast‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪Sharpness‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪Saturation‬‬‫ﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪Gradation‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‬‫ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [Normal‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪Auto‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪High Key‬‬‫‪Low Key‬‬‫‪Effect‬‬‫)‪(i-Enhance‬‬‫‪B&W Filter‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫‪Ye:Yellow‬‬‫‪Or:Orange‬‬‫‪R:Red‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫‪Pict. Tone‬‬‫)‪(Monotone‬‬‫‪N:Neutral‬‬‫‪S:Sepia‬‬‫‪B:Blue‬‬‫‪P:Purple‬‬‫‪G:Green‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﻐﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻤﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﺤﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء‬‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻣﺰﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻠﻮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‬‫ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‬‫ﺃﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺧﻀﺮﺍء‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪.[Normal‬‬‫‪AR 46‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫‪D‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻤﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫‪4032x3024‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪SN‬‬‫‪MN‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪RAW L F‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ YF) JPEG‬ﻭ‪ YN‬ﻭ‪ XN‬ﻭ‪ .(WN‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻀﻢ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ Y‬ﻭ‪ X‬ﻭ‪ (W‬ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ )‪ SF‬ﻭ‬‫‪ F‬ﻭ‪ N‬ﻭ‪ .(B‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [K Set‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫‪SF‬‬‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬‫‪) Y‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮ(‬‫‪*3024×4032‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪) X‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‬‫‪2400×3200‬‬‫‪*1920×2560‬‬‫‪1440×1920‬‬‫‪1200×1600‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬‫)ﺩﻗﻴﻖ(‬‫‪*YF‬‬‫‪*YN‬‬‫‪B‬‬‫)ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ(‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪*XN‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪*WN‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪*960×1280‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫‪768×1024‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫* ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪ [W‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Pixel Count‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ )ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ "‪ (".ORF‬ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺦ‬‫‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )ﺹ‪(67 .‬‬‫‪47 AR‬‬‫ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪59.94i 1080×1920‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪Full HD Fine‬‬‫‪Full HD‬‬‫‪Normal‬‬‫‪HD Fine‬‬‫‪HD Normal‬‬‫‪1080×1920‬‬‫‪59.94i‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪59.94p‬‬‫‪59.94p‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪720×1280‬‬‫‪SD‬‬‫‪480×640‬‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫*‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪AVCHD‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫‪.AVCHD‬‬‫*‪1‬‬‫*‪2‬‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪Motion JPEG‬‬‫*‪4‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﻭ ‪ 29‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺴﺐ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6:6‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[3:4‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫‪.GF‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ؛ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﺺ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻗﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪،‬‬‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(67 .‬‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ )ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﻴﺒﻲ( ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ISO 200‬‬‫— ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ — ﺛﻢ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ً ISO‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪AR 48‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪12800 – 200‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (G) jY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ )ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MF‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ ،[AF Mode‬ﺹ‪.(36 .‬‬‫‪Y12s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪12‬‬‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Y2s‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ M‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪.[ISO-Auto‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.jY‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ )ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ]‪ [S-AF‬ﻭ]‪.([MF‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻘﻒ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺣﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪49 AR‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫"ﺻﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ" )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪(P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬‫ّ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ )!(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ ،ART‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑـ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ"‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ"‪ "s‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻛﺲ‬‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "‪."s‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪Ps‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ" )ﺹ‪.(103 .‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪:[Dial Function] .‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪:[dLock] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪AR 50‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪(A‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،A‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +0.0‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ f‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺧﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﻔﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻓﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ )ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪f‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ‪(f‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭﻱ ‪ Fn2/Fn1‬ﻭ‪ R‬ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]‪ [Preview‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫]‪ [U Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [V Function‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [R Function‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻭﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪:[Button Function‬‬‫‪” v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻋﺪﺩ ‪(f‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪Fn1‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪:[Dial Function] .‬‬‫‪” v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪51 AR‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪(S‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،S‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.S‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +0.0‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﻀﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪:[Dial Function] .‬‬‫‪” v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ“ )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪AR 52‬‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪(M‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،BULB‬ﻳﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ً‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،M‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ٍ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.M‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (F) F‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭ‪ GF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 60 – 1/4000‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[BULB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء(‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪،M‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[BULB‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [BULB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪:[Dial Function] .‬‬‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪:[Bulb Timer] .‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪:[Bulb Focusing] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ‪.(102 .‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‪:‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ AE‬ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪/‬ﻣﺜﺒّﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬‫ﻋﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ٍ ISO‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﺸﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪:[Noise Reduct.] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪53 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﻳًﺎ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪) "OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬ﺹ‪(73 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Panorama‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[2‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫]‪[3‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﻱ )‪ (g‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻳﻨﻬﻲ‬‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 54‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.SCN‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [3D Photo‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪Line up the image.‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺪﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺭﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]‪ ،[3D photo was not created.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.1080 × 1920‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ 3D‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬‫• ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ‪.100%‬‬‫‪ $‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ .D‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪55 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﱢ‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Multiple Exposure‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) X‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[2f‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ 1/2‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪،[Off‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪RAW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Frame‬‬‫‪Auto Gain‬‬‫‪Overlay‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ a‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ D‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻛﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺄﻃﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻤﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ RAW‬ﻟـ ]‪ [K‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪" v :RAW‬ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(68 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [Overlay‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪/ MENU‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ P‬ﻭ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ S‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ ،[Overlay‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪.JPEG+RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻔﻆ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 56‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ(‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫"ﻟﻤﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ" ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ‪ P‬ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ S‬ﻭ ‪.M‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪o‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Bracketing‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) X‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪Shooting Menu 2‬‬‫‪j /Y‬‬‫‪Image Stabilizer‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪Multiple Exposure‬‬‫‪w‬‬‫‪# RC Mode‬‬‫‪Digital Tele-converter‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪) AE BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1.0 EV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪ :‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪ 2 :‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻭ ‪7‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ (P‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ (M‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(S‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪[EV Step].‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪2f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪2f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪2f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV -‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) WB BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 6‬ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭﻳﻦ ‪) A – B‬ﻛﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ – ﻣﺰﺭﻕ( ﻭ‪) G – M‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ – ﻣﺨﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ‬‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪G-M‬‬‫‪A-B‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪3f 4Step‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪57 AR‬‬‫‪) FL BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ؛ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[EV Step‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) ISO BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﻮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 0.3 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 0.7 EV‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1.0 EV‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ )ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻭﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻳﺠﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ؛ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪.[ISO Step‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪" g .[ISO-Auto Set‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪Bracketing‬‬‫‪-‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪A-- G-‬‬‫‪3f 0.3EV‬‬‫‪3f 0.7EV -‬‬‫‪3f 1.0EV -‬‬‫‪--‬‬‫‪AE BKT‬‬‫‪WB BKT‬‬‫‪FL BKT‬‬‫‪ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪) ART BKT‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ‪(ART‬‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ART BKT‬ﻭ ‪ WB BKT‬ﺃﻭ ‪.ISO BKT‬‬‫‪ART BKT‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Pop Art‬‬‫‪Soft Focus‬‬‫‪Pale&Light Color‬‬‫‪Light Tone‬‬‫‪Grainy Film‬‬‫‪Pin Hole‬‬‫‪Diorama‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ×‪ 2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [Digital Tele-converter‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) X‬ﺹ ‪.(107‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻇﻬﻮﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ T‬ﺃﻭ ‪ s‬ﺃﻭ ‪ f‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪ m‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪. SCN‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 58‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ (I) #‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫!‪ !#/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫‪SLOW#‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬‬‫!‪ SLOW‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ S‬ﻭ‬‫‪ M‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ُﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬‫‪/SLOW2#‬‬‫‪2nd‬‬‫‪Curtain‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺧﻠﻒ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪,FULL#‬‬‫‪ 1/4#‬ﺍﻟﺦ‬‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﺗﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪" v .‬ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺹ‪(104 .‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻛﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ]!‪) !#/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ]!‪) !#/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء([ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪59 AR‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺎ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺒﻴﻦ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻀﺎ ًء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪OFF‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪0‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪) FL BKT" v :‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(" )ﺹ‪(58 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MANUAL‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [w+F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Super FP‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ‪.(93 .‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪:‬‬‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﺟﻬﺪﻫﺎ ﻋﻦ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ X‬ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ M‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 1/180‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 60‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪ (HD‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻔﻴﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻌﻴﻦ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪.M‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪Program Auto‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ‬‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ‬‫‪M‬‬‫ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1/30‬ﺙ ﻭ ‪ 1/4000‬ﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺗﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪400 ISO‬‬‫ﻭ‪1600‬؛ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪ART10 – ART1‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ" )ﺹ‪(16 .‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،n‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪(20 .‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪IS OFF‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]‪ [Image Stabilizer‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [Vertical IS‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[Horizontal IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ]‪.[Auto‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻷﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻴﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪61 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ‪ (20 .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ‪R‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.GF‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫‪R‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Movie R On‬‬‫‪OFF ON‬‬‫‪ON‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬‫‪4‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [AF Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [S-AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.(Diorama) [ART7‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Movie Play‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪F‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ H I‬ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie Play‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪00:00:02/00:00:14‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪/‬ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪H/I‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻌﻪ‪.‬‬‫‪G/F‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪" v :‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ" )ﺹ‪(92 .‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‪" v :‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" )ﺹ‪(47 .‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪" v :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪) "(SEMA-1‬ﺹ‪(102 .‬‬‫‪AR 62‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪q‬‬
‫‪q‬‬

‫‪q‬‬

‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪LN‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪ H/I‬ﺃﻭ ‪j‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪D‬‬‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪.(15 .‬‬‫‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪r‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ‪.(14 .‬‬‫‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪q‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Fn2‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪Q‬‬

‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0015‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪01:02:03‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪.(33 .‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.v‬‬‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺹ‪.(15 .‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Erase ,m ,Rotate ,R ,0 ,RAW Data Edit ,JPEG Edit‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪63 AR‬‬‫‪U/r/Q‬‬‫‪q/G‬‬‫‪q/G‬‬‫‪q/G‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪r/U‬‬‫‪r/U‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪Thu‬‬‫‪Wed‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪6‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Fri‬‬‫‪Sat‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪14‬‬‫‪13‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪22‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪19‬‬‫‪18‬‬‫‪17‬‬‫‪29‬‬‫‪28‬‬‫‪27‬‬‫‪26‬‬‫‪25‬‬‫‪24‬‬‫‪23‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪31‬‬‫‪30‬‬‫‪16‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪ 100–9‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪2011.5‬‬‫‪Tue‬‬‫‪Mon‬‬‫‪Sun‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪" v :[G/Info Settings‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪q‬‬‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 25‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .100‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫"ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ"‪.‬‬‫‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪r‬‬‫ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 25‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .4‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪H/I/G/F‬‬‫ﺃﻭ ‪j‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.v‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‬‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [mode2‬ﻟـ ]‪.[q Close Up Mode‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪INFO/U‬‬‫‪/U‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪L N 100-0020‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪20‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫‪q/G‬‬‫‪/U‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫‪2x‬‬‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫‪20‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫)ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬‫‪H/I/G/F‬‬‫‪U‬‬‫‪INFO‬‬‫‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪q‬‬‫‪AR 64‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﻤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻭﺗﺮﺣﻴﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪2x‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .v‬ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ v‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺳﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪21‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [All Erase‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) W‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset Protect‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) q‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Format‬ﺹ‪ (99 .‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Rotate‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ F‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ G‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [R‬ﺹ‪ (107 .‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪ ،q‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫‪65 AR‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫<‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪Start‬‬‫‪BGM‬‬‫‪*Effect‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫‪Slide‬‬‫‪Interval‬‬‫‪Movie‬‬‫‪Interval‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮﻳﺔ ‪ 4) BGM‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ( ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻳﺤﺔ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ‬‫ٍ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Full‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭ]‪ [Short‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺘﺎﺣﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ‪.‬‬‫* ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻮ ]‪.[Fade‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 66‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪ ،RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺗﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Edit‬‬‫‪RAW Data‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .RAW‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow Adj‬ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﻣُﻀﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Redeye Fix‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[P‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‬‫ﻭ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪5‬‬

‫‪O‬‬

‫]‪ :[Aspect‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ [3:2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [16:9‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [6:6‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪.[3:4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Black & White‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Sepia‬ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Saturation‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 960 × 1280‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 480 × 640‬ﺃﻭ ‪.240 × 320‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪) 4:3‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[e-Portrait‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [RAW Data Edit‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [JPEG Edit‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪:‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺃﺻﻼ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺠﻴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )]‪ ،([Q‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪ [P‬ﻭ]‪ [Aspect‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪) 4:3‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬‫‪67 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[RAW‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ]‪(.[YN+RAW‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Q‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪.[Image Overlay‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،2‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻛﺘﺴﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ .2.0 – 0.1‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Image Overlay‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ؛ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Yes‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪×0.5‬‬‫‪×1.5‬‬‫‪×0.3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ‪ 4‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﻔﻆ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﻛﺐ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ]‪ [Image Overlay‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪JPEG Edit‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫‪Rotate‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫<‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[No‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [R Start‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪.H‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Erase‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.2‬‬‫‪AR 68‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪R Start‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬‫ﻭﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ )]‪.([PAL]/[NTSC‬‬‫• ]‪" v :[Video Out‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ "‪ "INPUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ "‪) "VIDEO‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ q‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬‫‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ(‬‫‪69 AR‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ "‪ "INPUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ "‪."HDMI INPUT‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﻘﺼﻮﺻﺔ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪" v :[HDMI] .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪1080i‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ‪.1080i HDMI‬‬‫‪720p‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬‫‪480p/576p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻟـ ]‪.[Video Out‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪.USB‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [HDMI Control‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪.[On‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺷﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪ (81 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.U‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ "‪ ،"Red‬ﻭﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ "‪."Green‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 70‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﺑـ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ‪ .Bluetooth‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[On‬‬‫ﻟـ ]‪ [# Menu Display] < [c/# Menu Display‬ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Send A Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Send Picture‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Sending‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Search‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Address Book‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪/‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪.JPEG‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ )ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬‫‪Accessory Port Menu‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Please Wait‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ‬‫]‪.[Receive Picture Request‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Accept‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،PIN‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ‪ 0000‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Receive Picture‬‬‫‪Receiving‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺑﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪:‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪71 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟـ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﻤﻀﻴﻔﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ‬‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Accessory Port A‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ )ﺹ‪.(90 .‬‬‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Address Book‬‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪Address Book‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪Picture Send Size‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Address List‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﻼﻣﻬﺎ‬‫‪6‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﻴﻦ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻀﻠﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [z‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [y‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫‪Send A Picture‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫! ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻪ‪:[Picture Copy Size] .‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪:[Copy All] .‬‬‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪:[Album Mem. Setup] .‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪:[Reset Protect] .‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ )ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ(‪:[Album Mem. Usage] .‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 72‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫‪Windows‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫‪Windows XP‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬‫‪Windows 7/Windows Vista‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‬‫"‪ "OLYMPUS Setup‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )‪ (Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫)‪ (Windows 7/Windows Vista‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﺑﺪﺃ"‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ )ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ (OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ "ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ "OLYMPUS‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫"‪."LAUNCHER.EXE‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ"‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "ﻧﻌﻢ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ"‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ ،USB‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻄﺎﻟﺒﻚ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪.[Storage‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺳﺠﻞ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﱢ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ" ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪ OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬ﻭ]‪.[ib‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬ﺃﻭ "‪ "OLYMPUS ib‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪73 AR‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪) Windows XP‬ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪Windows 7/Windows Vista/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Pentium D‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 3.0‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪) Windows XP‬ﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ(‪Windows 7/Windows Vista/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Pentium 4‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.3‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ Pentium D‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 3.0‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ(‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 512‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫)ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ — ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫]‪[ib‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 65,536‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻋﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 64‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻊ ‪ DirectX 9‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‪.‬‬‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪Macintosh‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ً‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ً‬
‫ً‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬‬‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫‪AR 74‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪–10.4.11‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪10.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ‬‫‪ Duo/Intel Core Solo‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ 1.5‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ 2‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ(‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫‪ 768 × 1024‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬‫‪ 32,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ )ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑـ ‪ 16,770,000‬ﻟﻮﻥ(‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺮﻧﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻴﻐﺔ ‪.AVCHD‬‬‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪ .USB Mass Storage Class‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬‫‪/Windows XP Professional/Windows XP Home Edition :Windows‬‬‫‪Windows 7/Windows Vista‬‬‫‪ Mac OS X :Macintosh‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 10.3‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺙ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.USB‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ .[Storage‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows 7/Windows Vista‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [MTP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ‪.Windows‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺍ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪[USB Mode‬‬‫ﺑﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪OLYMPUS Viewer 2/[ib‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪75 AR‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(*DPOF‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻔﻆ "ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﻣﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ .DPOF‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫* ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ( ﻫﻮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Playback Menu‬‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Edit‬‬‫<‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫‪Print Order Setting‬‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻛﺤﺠﺰ‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ GF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫<‬
‫‪ALL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪4‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪No‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫‪Time‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﻧﺸﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 76‬‬‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]<[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ]<[‪.‬‬‫• ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Reset‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Keep‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ G‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Set‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪8‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ‬‫]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪ [USB Mode‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪" v .‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Print‬‬‫‪USB‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪ ،[One Moment‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫‪Storage‬‬‫‪MTP‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪Exit‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ" )ﺹ‪.(78 .‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻼﺛﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪77 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.USB‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Easy Print Start‬‬‫‪PC/Custom Print‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪AR 78‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫‪All Print‬‬‫‪Multi Print‬‬‫‪All Index‬‬‫‪Print Order‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻧُﺴﺦ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺃﺟﺮﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭُﺟﺪﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺪﻋﻤﻪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Borderless‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ‪.‬‬‫‪Pics/sheet‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪.[Multi Print‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ‬‫)ﺣﺠﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪123-3456‬‬‫‪2011.05.01 12:30‬‬‫‪15‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫‪More‬‬‫‪Select‬‬‫‪Print‬‬‫)‪Print (f‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬‫]‪ [Single Print‬ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫‪Single Print‬‬‫)‪(t‬‬‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ]‪ ،[Single Print‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬‫)‪More (u‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [All Print‬ﻭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[Option Set‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫‪Date‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ U‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.HIGF‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ ،[Print‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Continue‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫×<‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [Cancel‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .Q‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ؛ ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.MENU‬‬‫‪79 AR‬‬‫‪9‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ"‬‫)ﺹ‪.(21 .‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪--.--.-- --:-‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪5sec‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪AR 80‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪) X‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪) W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺠﻠﻴﺰﻳﺔ‬‫‪ English‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪i‬‬‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺆﺛﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ‪) j‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﺃﻭ‬‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ ‪ FG‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪7‬‬

‫‪k‬‬
‫‪+1‬‬‫—‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-2‬‬‫‪Natural‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫—‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ [Natural‬ﻭ ]‪.[Vivid‬‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ]‪) .[EVF Adjust‬ﺹ‪(90 .‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ‬‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺟﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﻮًﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[20sec] – [1sec‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪:[Off‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫]‪:[Autoq‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪#/c‬‬‫‪Menu‬‬‫‪Display‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺃﻱ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬‫ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪81‬‬‫—‬

‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻗﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪c‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ ‪ #‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻨﺼﺮ ]‪ [c/# Menu Display‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) d‬ﺹ‪ (80 .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [c/# Menu Display‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪GF‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪11.05.01 14:01‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪5sec‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ GF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫‪Back‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪[c‬‬‫‪Setup Menu‬‬‫‪Q‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪11.05.01 14:01‬‬‫‪English‬‬‫‪j±0 k±0‬‬‫‪5sec‬‬‫‪Rec View‬‬‫‪c/# Menu Display‬‬‫‪Firmware‬‬‫‪Set‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪c‬‬
‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪AF Mode‬‬‫‪Full-time AF‬‬‫‪AF Area‬‬‫‪P Set Up‬‬‫‪Reset Lens‬‬‫‪Bulb Focusing‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻌﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﻻﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬‫)‪ .(MF‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬

‫‪R‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪36‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪c Menu Display‬‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪W‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫—‬
‫‪37‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫—‬‫‪81 AR‬‬‫‪R AF/MF‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪Focus Ring‬‬‫‪MF Assist‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬‫‪ p‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺗﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺏ‪.‬‬‫‪AF Illuminat.‬‬‫‪I Face Priority‬‬‫)‬‫‪S Button/Dial‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL Memo‬‬‫‪Button Function‬‬‫‪U Function‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪AR 82‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫‪P Set Home‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪V Function‬‬‫‪R‬‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫ﻗﺮﻳﺐ‬‫)‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪39‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫‪88‬‬‫—‬‫‪،MF ،P Home ،k ،Preview ،R REC ،AEL/AFL ،F‬‬‫‪،IS Mode ،Backlit LCD ،Myset ،Test Picture ،RAWK‬‬‫‪Off ،Digital Tele-converter ،Live Guide‬‬‫‪89‬‬‫‪41‬‬‫‪R Function‬‬‫‪I Function‬‬‫‪G Function‬‬‫‪Dial Function‬‬‫‪Dial Direction‬‬‫‪d Lock‬‬‫‪d Lock ،WB ،ISO ،jY ،# ،F‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻠﻌﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MENU‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪T Release‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Rls Priority C‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) S-AF‬ﺹ‪(36 .‬‬‫ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ‪) C-AF‬ﺹ‪.(36 .‬‬‫‪U DISP/8/PC‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪HDMI‬‬‫‪Video Out‬‬‫‪G/Info Settings‬‬‫‪KControl‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪ART LV Mode‬‬

‫‪U‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫‪70‬‬‫‪69‬‬‫‪33 ،32‬‬‫‪64‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪) Live Control‬ﺹ‪(20 .‬‬‫‪) SCP‬ﺹ‪(91 .‬‬‫‪) Live Guide‬ﺹ‪(18 .‬‬‫‪Art Menu‬‬‫‪Scene Menu‬‬‫‪Live View Boost‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Out‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬‫‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[HDMI Control‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ‪.HDMI‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )]‪ [NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([PAL‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.INFO‬‬‫]‪ :[qInfo‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[LV-Info‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ]‪ [w‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [x‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [y‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[X‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬‫]‪.[Displayed Grid‬‬‫]‪ :[G Settings‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫‪Picture Mode‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪Histogram‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪Mode Guide‬‬‫—‬‫‪/A/P‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪ART‬‬‫‪SCN‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬

‫‪On/Off‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫–‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫–‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪On/Off‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Highlight‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Shadow‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻠﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪32‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫—‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪Rls Priority S‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪T‬‬

‫‪33‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫‪83 AR‬‬‫‪U Disp/8/PC‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪q Close Up‬‬‫‪Mode‬‬‫‪Info Off‬‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫‪Sleep‬‬‫‪) 8‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬‫‪Volume‬‬‫‪USB Mode‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪EV Step‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Metering‬‬‫‪AEL Metering‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪ISO Step‬‬‫‪ISO-Auto Set‬‬‫‪ISO-Auto‬‬‫‪Bulb Timer‬‬‫‪Anti-shock z‬‬‫‪AR 84‬‬‫‪v‬‬‫]‪ :[mode1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ 14‬ﻣﺮﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪ G‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[mode2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ U‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪.[Hold‬‬‫ﺳﺘﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ )ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Off‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪64 ،14‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪،15‬‬‫‪66 ،62‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Auto‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪V Exp/p/ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪U‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬

‫—‬
‫‪c‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪:[Auto] .(41 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫]‪ [Auto‬ﻟـ ]‪.[ISO‬‬‫]‪ :[High Limit‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Default‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.[Auto] ISO‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬‫]‪ :[S/A/P‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫‪ .M‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ISO 200‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.M‬‬‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[All‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﺳﻜﻮﺑﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ‪ (49 .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ )ﺹ‪.(49 .‬‬

‫‪V‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪41‬‬‫—‬‫‪48‬‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪# X-Sync.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪104‬‬‫‪# Slow Limit‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪104‬‬‫‪w+F‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[On‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪60 ،40‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪Noise Reduct.‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[On‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Off‬ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﻜﻔﺎءﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫‪53‬‬‫‪Noise Filter‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪WB‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬‫> ‪All‬‬‫]‪ :[All Set‬ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ]‪.[CWB‬‬‫]‪ :[All Reset‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬‫]‪ [CWB‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.0‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ "ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻓﺌﺔ" ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻫﺠﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪W Keep Warm‬‬‫‪Color‬‬‫‪#+WB‬‬‫‪Color Space‬‬‫‪Shading Comp.‬‬‫‪43‬‬‫—‬‫—‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﺎﺑﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻄﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﺮﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫—‬
‫—‬

‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪W #Custom‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪W‬‬

‫‪85 AR‬‬‫‪X K/Color/WB‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪K Set‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪X‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺣﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬‫ﻭﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪.JPEG‬‬‫‪(1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )]‪[K1‬‬‫– ]‪ ([K4‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪(2‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪D Set‬‬‫‪47‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪W SF‬‬‫‪W N‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪F‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪X‬‬

‫‪Y SF‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺠﺎﻡ ]‪ [X‬ﻭ]‪.[W‬‬‫‪(1‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Pixel Count‬ﻓﻲ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.X‬‬‫‪(2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Xiddle‬ﺃﻭ‬‫]‪ [Wmall‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.I‬‬‫‪(3‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Pixel Count‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪Xiddle‬‬‫‪Wmall‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪AR 86‬‬‫‪Y Record/Erase‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪47‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪Quick Erase‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ ،[On‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﻴﺤﺬﻑ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬‫‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ )ﺹ‪.(15 .‬‬‫]‪ :[JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[RAW+JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻠﺘﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺴﺦ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [All Erase‬ﺹ‪.(65 .‬‬‫‪File Name‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫ﻣﻦ‪ .0001‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪Erase‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬
‫‪v‬‬
‫—‬

‫‪47‬‬‫—‬‫‪Y Record/Erase‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Edit Filename‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ‬‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫‪sRGB: Pmdd0000.jpg‬‬‫‪Pmdd‬‬‫‪AdobeRGB: _mdd0000.jpg‬‬‫‪mdd‬‬‫—‬‫‪Priority Set‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ )]‪ [Yes‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ([No‬ﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫—‬‫‪dpi Setting‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Auto‬ﺗﺘﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Custom‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ I‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ً 63‬‬‫ﺣﺮﻓﺎ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Info.‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Artist Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Copyright Name‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺎﻟﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Copyright‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪(1‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ 2‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪.1‬‬‫‪(2‬‬‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻹﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ‪،‬‬‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ]‪ [END‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫‪ INFO‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ‪ ،1‬ﻇﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.D‬‬

‫—‬

‫—‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪05/70‬‬‫‪Copyright Name‬‬‫‪ABCDE‬‬‫‪! ” # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - . /‬‬‫? > = < ; ‪0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 :‬‬‫‪@ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O‬‬‫_ ] [ ‪P Q R S T U V W X Y Z‬‬‫‪a b c d e f g h i j k l m n END‬‬‫} { ‪o p q r s t u v w x y z‬‬‫‪Delete‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Cancel‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺰﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫]‪ .[Copyright Settings‬ﻭﺳﺘﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺃﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Z Movie‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬

‫‪Z‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪nMode‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪Movie+Still‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪92‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺻﺎﻣﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪62‬‬‫‪61‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪Y‬‬

‫‪87 AR‬‬‫‪b K Utility‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Pixel Mapping‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪98‬‬‫‪ Exposure Shift‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺜﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )ﺹ‪.(40 .‬‬‫‪: Warning‬‬‫‪Level‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ ‪.‬‬‫‪Level Adjust‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Reset‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Adjust‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Touch Screen‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪.‬‬‫‪*Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬

‫—‬

‫‪6‬‬
‫—‬
‫‪22‬‬‫‪99‬‬‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Off‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪.[Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻟﻼﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬‫‪S-AF AEL/AFL‬‬‫ ‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪c‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪S‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫]‪[AEL/AFL‬‬‫‪AEL/S-AF‬‬‫‪Exposure‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Fn1‬ﻭ‪ R‬ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪AFL‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪C-AF‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪AR 88‬‬‫‪AEL‬‬‫‪Half Way‬‬‫‪Fully‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪mode4‬‬‫‪mode1‬‬‫‪mode2‬‬‫‪mode3‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫‪ Fn1‬ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺘﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫ﺑﺪء ‪C-AF‬‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫ﻣﻘﻔﻞ‬‫–‬‫–‬‫‪S-AF‬‬‫ ‪R Function ،V Function ،U Function‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫]‪[Button Function‬‬‫]‪[R Function]/[V Function]/[U Function‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻳﻦ ‪ Fn2/Fn1‬ﻭ‪ .R‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺯﺭ ﻟﻸﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪F‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺻﻴﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪AEL/AFL‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ n‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺹ‪.(51 .‬‬‫‪) Preview‬ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫‪V‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )ﺹ‪.(44 .‬‬‫‪P Home‬‬‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [P Set Home‬ﺹ‪ .(82 .‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬‫ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ .p‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬‫ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ‪.RAW+JPEG‬‬‫‪MF‬‬‫‪RAW K‬‬‫‪Test Picture‬‬‫‪Myset4 – Myset1‬‬‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.R‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟـ ]‪) [Reset/Myset‬ﺹ‪.(35 .‬‬‫‪Backlit LCD‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Fn2/Fn1‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪IS Mode‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪Live Guide‬‬‫‪ Digital Tele-converter‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪R REC‬‬‫‪89 AR‬‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬‫‪A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪Please Wait‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻔﻴﻦ ﻟﺪﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪71‬‬‫‪ :[Address List] Address Book‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻴﻔﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[New Pairing‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻓﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Search Timer‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪.‬‬‫‪My OLYMPUS‬‬‫‪PENPAL‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫‪Picture Send‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Small‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.640 × 480‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Large‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 3: Medium‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1280 × 960‬‬‫‪71‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪MENU‬‬

‫‪#‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫‪v‬‬‫‪Copy All‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪Reset Protect‬‬‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺒﻮﻡ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪Album Mem.‬‬‫‪Usage‬‬‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‪.[Size 2: Medium‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪Album Mem.‬‬‫‪Setup‬‬‫]‪ :[All Erase‬ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Format Album‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪Picture Copy‬‬‫‪Size‬‬‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 1: Large‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‪.‬‬‫]‪ :[Size 2: Medium‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻳﻜﺎﻓﺊ ‪.1920 × 1440‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪C Electronic Viewfinder‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬‫‪EVF‬‬‫‪Adjust‬‬‫‪MENU‬‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (j‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪ k‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫‪ GF‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺘﻴﻦ ]‪ [+7‬ﻭ]‪.[–7‬‬

‫‪C‬‬
‫‪v‬‬

‫‪EVF Adjust‬‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪+2‬‬‫‪j‬‬‫‪-5‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪AR 90‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪72‬‬‫‪B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪A‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪) [SCP] < [KControl Settings‬ﺹ‪ .(83 .‬ﻟﻼﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ Q‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪6‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪7‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪8‬‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬

‫‪9‬‬

‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬

‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪5‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪mall‬‬‫‪Super Fine +RAW‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪250 F5.6 +2.0‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪a 0‬‬

‫‪b‬‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪d‬‬

‫‪1‬‬

‫‪e‬‬

‫ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HIGF‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‪.‬‬‫‪Recommended ISO‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪NORM‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬‫‪ISO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪AUTO‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪4:3‬‬‫‪mall‬‬‫‪Super Fine +RAW‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪38‬‬

‫‪2‬‬

‫‪P‬‬

‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HI‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬‫• ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 2‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﺰﻭﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺴﺮﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻼﻝ ٍ‬‫‪ISO-A‬‬‫‪200‬‬‫‪640‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.................................. ISO‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.............‬ﺹ‪49 .‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪59 .‬‬‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪.........................‬ﺹ‪60 .‬‬‫‪ 6‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪43 .‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.................‬ﺹ‪44 .‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪45 .‬‬‫‪ 8‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪............................ N‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ‪...................................... J‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ‪..................................... T‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪.............................. z‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪.................. x‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪...................... y‬ﺹ‪46 .‬‬‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪85 .‬‬‫‪ 0‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ‪ .............................‬ﺹ‪ 39 .‬ﻭ‪82‬‬‫‪ a‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪....................................‬ﺹ‪41 .‬‬‫‪ b‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.....................‬ﺹ‪48 .‬‬‫‪ c‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪..................................‬ﺹ‪47 .‬‬‫‪ d‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪36 .‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪..........................‬ﺹ‪37 .‬‬‫‪ e‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪...................................‬ﺹ‪42 .‬‬‫‪500‬‬‫‪400‬‬‫‪320‬‬‫‪250‬‬‫‪AUTO 200‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪91 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،R‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬‫‪ Fn1‬ﻭ ‪ Fn2‬ﻭ ‪.R‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.n‬‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﻀﻲء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪HD‬‬‫‪00:21:38‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫‪n‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪n‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻀﻲء ‪ ●REC‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ٍ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬‫‪n‬‬‫‪00:02:18‬‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫‪10‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪ [Movie+Still‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Movie+Still‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪.Z (81 .‬‬‫‪Custom I‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪On‬‬‫‪nMode‬‬‫‪Movie+Still‬‬‫‪Movie R‬‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [On‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 92‬‬‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫‪Back‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ RC‬ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ MODE‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ]‪ [On‬ﻟـ ]‪ [# RC Mode‬ﻓﻲ ‪ X‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) 2‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.RC‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﻻﺣﻆ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.(RC‬‬‫‪3‬‬‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪A Mode‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫]‪ [HI‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [MID‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[LO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫• ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4‬‬‫‪LO‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪38‬‬‫‪+5.0‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫–‬‫‪+3.0‬‬‫‪Ch‬‬‫‪0.0‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪M‬‬‫‪Off‬‬‫‪TTL‬‬‫‪250 F5.6‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫‪10‬‬‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ UP#‬ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‬‫ﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪30°‬‬‫‪60°‬‬‫‪7m‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪50°‬‬‫‪5m‬‬‫‪100°‬‬‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Super FP‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ‬‫‪.Super FP‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻋﺪﻝ‬‫ﻗﻮﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟـ‬‫‪ ،MANUAL‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﻀﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ‬‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻦ ‪ٍ 4‬‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬‫‪93 AR‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺩ‬‫• ﻳﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬‫• ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﻢ‬‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪) [Sleep] v .‬ﺹ‪(13 .‬‬‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ )‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ‪.‬‬‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ #‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺋﻦ ﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻭﺳﻂ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻳﺔ‬‫ﺗﻀﺎء ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﺛﺒﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻻ‬‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺒﺎﻳﻨﺔ‬‫‪AR 94‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻭﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬‫]‪ [Noise Reduct.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪" v .[Off‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪" v .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ" )ﺹ‪(7 .‬‬‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫• ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﻮﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،M‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻃﺮﺃﺕ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺿﻮء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻄﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻗﻮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻠﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﺘﻈﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻳﺪﻙ ﻟﺤﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪" v .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ" )ﺹ‪(100 .‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ( ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﺒﻖ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪:‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪ [j‬ﻭ]‪ ،[Noise Reduct.‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ )ﺑﻜﺴﻼﺕ( ﻣﻠﺼﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ .[Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪" v‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ‪(98 .‬‬‫‪95 AR‬‬‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Card‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ "‪ ."LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬‫)ﺹ‪(99 .‬‬‫‪Card Error‬‬‫‪Write Protect‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Full‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ ،[Clean Card‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪Q‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [Yes][Format‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬‫‪ Q‬ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ً‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺪ ﺃﺻﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬‫ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫‪Clean the contact area of‬‬‫‪the card with a dry cloth.‬‬‫‪Clean Card‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪No Picture‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫‪The Image‬‬‫‪Cannot Be‬‬‫‪Edited‬‬‫‪Picture Error‬‬‫‪AR 96‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻲ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ‬‫‪m‬‬‫‪Internal camera‬‬‫‪temperature is‬‬‫‪too high.‬‬‫‪Please wait for‬‬‫‪cooling before‬‬‫‪camera use.‬‬‫‪Battery Empty‬‬‫‪No Connection‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﺗﺒﺮﻳﺪ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻭﺻﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬‫ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Paper‬‬‫ﻧﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺧﺮﻃﻮﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪No Ink‬‬‫‪Jammed‬‬‫‪Settings‬‬‫‪Changed‬‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪Print Error‬‬‫‪Cannot Print‬‬‫‪The lens is‬‬‫‪ locked. Please‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ‬‫‪ extend the lens.‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪) .‬ﺹ‪(12 .‬‬‫‪Please check the‬‬‫‪ status of a lens.‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺧﻠﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻓﺤﺺ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺷ ّﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻢ ﺣﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪97 AR‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺴﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﺑﺼﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‬‫ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﻴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﺨﺘﺺ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺛﺒّﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺜﺒّﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬‫ﻏﻄﺎءﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻹﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬‫ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻔﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪ -‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 98‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﺛﻢ ‪.Q‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Pixel Mapping‬ﻓﻲ ‪ c‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ‪ (81 .‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪.b‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ]‪ [Busy‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.1‬‬‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬‫"ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪) SD‬ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ(‪ SD :‬ﻭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻭ ‪ .Eye-Fi‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ‬‫"‪ ،"LOCK‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪LOCK‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﺩﻣﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪[Eye-Fi‬‬‫)ﺹ‪ (88 .‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[Off‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪1‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪.[Format‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Yes‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Q‬‬‫‪Card Setup‬‬‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [Card Setup‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) W‬ﺹ‪.(107 .‬‬‫• ﺗﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪All Erase‬‬‫‪Format‬‬‫‪Set‬‬‫‪Back‬‬‫‪99 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ‪ OLYMPUS‬ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪BLS-1‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ ،BCS-1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ BLS-5‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪.BCS-5‬‬‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺘﻬﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺰﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﻔﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻦ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‪.‬‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬‫ً‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ‬‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪" .‬ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ" )ﺹ‪(114 .‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﺤﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﻜﻞ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻟﻴﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺘﺠﺮ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ M. ZUIKO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪،‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺠﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 100‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻗﻠﻨﺴﻮﺓ ﺑﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺯﺧﺮﻓﻴﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫‪ 1‬ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 2‬ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬‫‪ 3‬ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫‪ 5‬ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 6‬ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬‫‪ 7‬ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬‫ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪OM‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬‫‪Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻻ‬

‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬

‫*‪1‬‬‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [C-AF‬ﻭ]‪ [C-AF+TR‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ]‪.[AF Mode‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺰﺣﻴﺔ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫)ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ(‬‫• ‪ 0.25‬ﻡ – ) )‪ 19 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬‫• ‪ 0.3‬ﻡ – ) )‪ 42 – 20‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ(‬‫‪ 115‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮ ×‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ(‬‫‪ l56.5× 50‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﻗﻄﺮ ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﻡ – )‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ – )‬‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ‪AF/MF‬‬‫‪ 71‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬‫‪ 190‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬‫‪ 260‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ 150 – 14 R‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 17‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪R II‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ 150 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 17‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 5.6‬‬‫‪f/2.8‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 5.6‬‬‫‪8.2° – 75° 8.2° – 30.3°‬‬‫‪64.9°‬‬‫‪29° – 75°‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ 10 ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ 11 ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪،‬‬‫‪ 7‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ 8 ،‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫‪ 15‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ 13‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬‫‪ 6‬ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬‫ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫‪f/4.0 – 22‬‬‫‪f/2.8 – 22‬‬‫‪f/3.5 – 22‬‬‫‪ l57 × 22‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ l63.5 × 83‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ l63.5 ×83‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 37‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 58‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺳﻤﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪101 AR‬‬‫ﺇﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪(MMF-2) Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ Four Thirds‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ MMF-2‬ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .Four Thirds‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪(MF-2) OM‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ OM‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ .OLYMPUS‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )‪(RM-UC1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺑﺴﻂ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ‬‫ﻟﻸﺿﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﺳﻬﻞ ﻭﺳﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺭﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ f) SCN‬ﺃﻭ ‪ w‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(m‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ )‪(MAL-1‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ )‪(SEMA-1‬‬‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ‬‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻮﻳﺼﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ‪ l3.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ )‪(VF-2‬‬‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻭﻣﻼﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻌﺐ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻚ ﺑﺮﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 102‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ(‬‫‪60" F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪P‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬‫‪4000 F22‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫‪30" F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪4000 F5.6‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻠّﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬‫‪2000 F2.8‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﻲء‪.‬‬‫• ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﻠّﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ‪ ND‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ )ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء(‪.‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪S‬‬

‫‪125 F22‬‬‫• ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪103 AR‬‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪A/P‬‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪AUTO#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫!‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫!‬‫‪SLOW‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪SLOW#‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‬‫‪SLOW2‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪M/S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫‪k‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ* ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 1/30‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 30‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪.‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ* ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫‪!#‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‬‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬‫‪$‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪k‬‬‫‪2nd-C‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء‪/‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫‪#‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪.‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ‬‫‪ 60‬ﺙ‪– .‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ‪.‬‬‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Super FP‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ $ ،#AUTO‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻨﻄﺎﻕ‬‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻈﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺋﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‬‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻧﺼﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 42 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﻟﻺﺧﺮﺍﺝ‪.‬‬‫‪ 0.25‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 17‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫‪ 1.0‬ﻡ‬‫‪ 150 – 40‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪ 150 – 14‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻠﻮﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ M‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬‫‪AR 104‬‬‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪M‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫*‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) /1‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ × ‪ (2‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻳﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪1/60‬‬‫‪1/180‬‬‫―‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪" v :[# X-Sync.] 1/180 – 1/60 :‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪" v :[# Slow Limit] 1/180 – 30 :‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ" )ﺹ‪(81 .‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺘﻼءﻡ‬‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Super FP‬‬‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ً‬‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫‪FL-50R‬‬‫‪،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪FP TTL ،MANUAL‬‬‫‪FP MANUAL ،AUTO‬‬‫‪ 85) GN50‬ﻣﻠﻢ*( ‪ 24) GN28‬ﻣﻠﻢ*(‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪ 85) GN36‬ﻣﻠﻢ*( ‪ 24) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ*(‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪ 28) GN20‬ﻣﻠﻢ*(‬‫‪D‬‬‫‪،AUTO ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪MANUAL‬‬‫‪ 28) GN14‬ﻣﻠﻢ*(‬‫–‬‫‪GN11‬‬‫–‬‫‪GN22‬‬‫–‬‫‪FL-36R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫‪MANUAL ،TTL-AUTO‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪) GN‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ( )‪(ISO100‬‬‫‪RC‬‬‫‪mode‬‬‫* ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ )ﻳﺤﺴﺐ ﺑﻨﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‪.‬‬‫‪105 AR‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ‪/‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪.4:3‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫)‪(Pixel Count‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬‫‪RAW‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪YSF‬‬‫‪4032×3024‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪YF‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪YN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪YB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪3200×2400‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪2560×1920‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪1920×1440‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪XSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪XF‬‬‫‪1600×1200‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪XN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪XB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪1280×960‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪1024×768‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫‪1/2.7‬‬‫‪WSF‬‬‫‪1/4‬‬‫‪WF‬‬‫‪640×480‬‬‫‪1/8‬‬‫‪WN‬‬‫‪1/12‬‬‫‪WB‬‬‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻓﺘﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫‪ORF‬‬‫‪JPEG‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬‫‪ 13.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 8.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 5.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 3.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 2.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.8‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.7‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 1.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.5‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.9‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.6‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.4‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.3‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.2‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 0.1‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫*‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫‪55‬‬‫‪102‬‬‫‪146‬‬‫‪322‬‬‫‪480‬‬‫‪155‬‬‫‪257‬‬‫‪508‬‬‫‪753‬‬‫‪271‬‬‫‪398‬‬‫‪782‬‬‫‪1151‬‬‫‪476‬‬‫‪701‬‬‫‪1356‬‬‫‪1968‬‬‫‪678‬‬‫‪984‬‬‫‪1906‬‬‫‪2653‬‬‫‪1034‬‬‫‪1488‬‬‫‪2773‬‬‫‪3813‬‬‫‪1564‬‬‫‪2260‬‬‫‪4068‬‬‫‪5547‬‬‫‪3589‬‬‫‪5085‬‬‫‪7627‬‬‫‪10170‬‬‫‪ #‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪ -‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ‬‫ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬‫• ﻭﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ 9999‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑـ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫‪AR 106‬‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬.[Myset] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺘﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬:1*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Full] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:2*.[Reset] ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﻴﺎﺭ‬Basic] ‫ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬:3*‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬Kv
99 ،65
35
45

3*

2*

1*

D

D
D

D

47

D

D

D

48

D

D

D

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬jNatural
YN

Still Picture

Image Aspect

49

D

D

D

o

j/Y

D

D

D

e
Off

Image Stabilizer

58

Off
D

D

D

58
58
56

D

D

60
93
58

D
D
D

D
D
D

D
D
D

v

3*

2*

1*

W

K

Movie

k
4:3

42
57
57

X

AE BKT
A– B
G–M

WB BKTOffFL BKT

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
±0.0
Off
Off

ISO BKT
ART BKT
Frame
Auto Gain
Overlay

Bracketing

Multiple Exposurew#RC Mode

Digital Tele-converter11‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬q‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

66

65
67
67
68
68
76
65

107 AR‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Card Setup
Reset/Myset
Picture Mode

D
D
D

D

D
D
D
D
D
D

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬―Melancholy
Fade
All
3sec
Short
On
―
―
―
―
―
―

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬

Start
BGM
EffectSlide
Slide IntervalMovie IntervalqmR
RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit
R

Sel. Image

Edit

Image Overlay>
Reset Protect‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬d
v
7
80
80
80

3*

D
D

80

2*
D
D
D

1*

D

D

80

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬――Vivid ،0± k ،0± j
5sec
Off
Off
―

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬X*W
i
Rec View

c Menu Display# Menu Display

dc/# Menu Display
Firmware.‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬c
v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬AF/MF R

81

82

D

D

D

D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D

D
D

D

S-AF
C–AF
Off
o
SpiralOn
On

Still Picture
Movie

c

AF ModeFull-time AF
AF Area

D
D

b
Off

P Set Up
Reset Lens
Bulb Focusing
Focus Ring
MF AssistDoOn

P Set HomeAF Illuminat.

DK

I Face Priority
Button/dial S

D

D

D

D

D

D

L
F
R REC

D

#

D

83

D
D

D

U Function
V Function
R Function
I Function
G Function
P

FNo. :j FNo. :jA

Shutter :j Shutter :jS

FNo. :j Shutter :j

M

B :j A/Value :jMenuqExposure
Menu

D

D

D

D

GU :j Prev/Next :j
Dial1
Dial1
Off

D
D

D
D

Off
On

11

AEL/AFL MemoPs :j Ps :j

j/Y

82

AEL/AFL

ButtonFunction‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬

D

S-AF
C-AF
MF
On

D

mode1
mode2
mode1

Dial Function

Dial
DirectiondLock
Release T
Rls Priority S
Rls Priority C

AR 108

v

3*

2*

1*

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Disp/8/PC U

D

83

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1080i
Off
D
D
D

―
Overall ،Image Onlyu ،Image Only
Calendar ،O
Live Guide
Live Control
Art Menu
Scene Menu
On
255
0
On
Off
mode1
mode1
10sec
Hold
1min
On
3
Auto

D

D

D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

84

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

D
85

D
D
D
D
D

D

84

11

D
D
D
D

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
85

D

D
D
D
D

HDMI OutHDMI Control* Video Out
q Info
LV-Info

G/InfoSettings
G Settings
iAUTO
P/A/S/M
KControlSettings
ART
SCN
Picture Mode Settings
Highlight
Histogram
Settings
Shadow
Mode Guide
Live View Boost
ART LV Modeq Close Up Mode
Info Off
Backlit LCD
Sleep
8
VolumeUSB Mode
Exp/p/ISO V
EV Step
Metering
AEL Metering
ISO
ISO Step
ISO-Auto Set
ISO-Auto
Bulb Timer
Anti-Shock z# Custom W

D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D

1/3EV
p
Auto
Auto
1/3EV
200 :Default،1600 :High Limit
P/A/S
8min
Off

D

D

1/180

#X-Sync.

D

D

1/60

#Slow Limit

D

D

Off

D
D
D

D
D
D

Auto
Standard
Auto

w+F
K/Color/WB X
Noise Reduct.
Noise Filter
WB

D

D

D

0 :G ،0 :A

c

HDMI

—

All Set—All Reset

All >

D

D

D

On

W Keep Warm Color

D

D

D

Off

#+WB

.‫* ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬109 AR

v
85

86

86

3*

2*

1*

D
D
D

D
D
D

D
D
D

D

D

D

2560×1920
1280×960

D
D

D
D

D
D

Off
RAW+JPEG

D
87

87

D
D
D

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
sRGB
Off

—

Pixel Count

Record/Erase Y
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase

D

Auto

File Name

D

Off

Edit Filename
Priority Set

D

No

D

Auto

D

Off

D
D
D

dpi Setting
Copyright Info.

—

Artist Name—

Copyright Name

D
D

Movie RK Utility b
Pixel Mapping

D

D
D
D
D

3*

2*

p
J
5

D
±0
—
On
Off

D

Exposure
Shift: Warning Level
Level Adjust
Touch Screen Settings
Eye-Fi‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬#v
90 ،711*‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‬
—
—
30sec

D

—
—

90
D

—
—
—
—

90

90

Size 1: Small

D

D

Size 2: Medium

D

0± k ،0± j‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬OLYMPUS PENPAL Share A #Please Wait
Address List
Search Timer Address Book

11‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬D

Copyright
Settings
Movie ZnMode
Movie+Still

P
Off
On

±0
D

c

K Set
Xiddle
Wmall

—

88

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬Color Space
Shading Comp.

New Pairing
My OLYMPUS PENPAL
Picture Send Size
OLYMPUS PENPAL Album B
Copy All
Reset Protect
Album Mem. UsageAlbum Mem. Setup
Picture Copy Size
Electronic Viewfinder C
EVF Adjust

AR 110‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‬‫‪ ،M.Zuiko Digital‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪Micro Four Thirds‬‬‫ﺿﻌﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬‫"‪ 4/3‬ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪ 13,060,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 12,300,000‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 17.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( × ‪ 13.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬‫‪(4:3) 1.33‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪Live MOS‬‬‫‪100%‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ "‪ 3.0‬ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ‬‫‪ 610,000‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ‪(2 : 3‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﻣﺒﺮﻣﺞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬‫‪ 60 – 1/4000‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫‪ 35‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬‫‪ :P/iAUTO :A‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪/‬‬‫‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ :S/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪/‬‬‫‪ :M‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :ART/‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‪/‬‬‫‪ :SCN‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ :n/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫‪ EV 1 ،1/3) 12800 – 200‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ(‬‫‪) ±3 EV‬ﺧﻄﻮﺓ ‪(EV 1 ،1/2 ،1/3‬‬‫‪11‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪) TTL‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬‫‪) 18 – –1 EV‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‪/‬ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ(‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ 6‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪/‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD/SDHC/SDXC/Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪) JPEG ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ )‪ ،((DCF‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪،RAW‬‬‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪MP‬‬‫‪ ،Exif 2.2‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭ‪ ،PRINT Image Matching III‬ﻭ‪PictBridge‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬‫‪AVI Motion JPEG/AVCHD‬‬‫‪ 48 PCM‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪Dolby Digital/‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ‬‫‪111 AR‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ 12 :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬‫‪(ISO200) 10‬‬‫‪) TTL-AUTO‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ‪MANUAL/(TTL‬‬‫‪ 1/180‬ﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ )ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪/(AV‬ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪/(C‬ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ × ‪1‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫‪ 122.0‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 69.1‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 34.3‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ( )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ(‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 369‬ﺟﺮﺍﻡ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ 60‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫‪) 90% – 30%‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪) 90% – 10%/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ٌ‬‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪High-Definition‬‬‫‪ Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫‪(PS-BLS1) BLS-1‬‬‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻲ‬‫‪ 7.2‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﻤﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫‪11‬‬‫‪BLS-5‬‬‫‪ 1,150‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‬‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺮﻳﻎ‬‫‪ 500‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ(‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ(‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 35.5‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 12.8‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 55‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 46‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 44‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ‬‫‪(PS-BCS1) BCS-1‬‬‫‪BCS-5‬‬‫ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 100‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ – ‪ 240‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪ 60/50‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‬‫‪ 8.35‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‪ 400 ،‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ(‬‫‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‪ 30‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳ ًﺒَﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ(‬‫‪ 0‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ –20/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ – ‪ 60‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ(‬‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 62‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﺮﺽ( × ‪ 38‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( × ‪ 83‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻋﻤﻖ(‬‫‪ 72‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫‪ 70‬ﺟﺮﺍﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬‫• ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 112‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬‫ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻃﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺑ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻪ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪ LED‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬‫)ﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ )‪ 3‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺿﻊ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻻﺷﺘﺒﺎﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬‫ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺒﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ — ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺫﺍﺫ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ — ﻷﻣﺎﻧﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ – ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻢ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ — ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ — ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺴﻢ‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ — ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫‪113 AR‬‬‫• ﺍﺑﺘﻼﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬‫• ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻬﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺿﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻃﻼﻗﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪12‬‬‫•‬‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﺭﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺠﻴﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺮﺩﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻪ )ﺑﺪﺛﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ‬‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ‬‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬‫• ﺳﺘﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ﺗﻘﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺭﺗ ِﺪ ﻗﻔﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﻜﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺸﺘﺒﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬‫ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺭﺯﺓ – ﻭﻳﺴﺒﺐ ً‬‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎ ﺣﺎ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬

‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﺷﻮﺍﺣﻦ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ‬‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻮﻫﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‬‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﻤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺳﻮﺍﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻏﺴﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﻤﺎء ٍ‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‬‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺼﻞ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻔﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ‬‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺻﻮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺸﻘﻮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺴﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫ﺳﺎﺋﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﺮﺑﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﻏﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻤﺎء ٍ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻋﺎﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ً‬‫ﺑﺤﺜﺎ‬‫ﻋﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‬‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 114‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫• ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻗﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪:‬‬‫• ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺍﻃﺊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ‬‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ )ﻣﻮﻗﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻃﻴﺐ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻔﺠﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻣﻴﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬

‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﺧﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺮﻗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺘﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﻄﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ً‬‫ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻤﻚ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ‬‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﺴﻞ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬‫• ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ‬‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‬‫ً‬‫ﻋﻄﻼ؛ ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‬‫ﻣﺘﻌﺮﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬‫ً‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ً‬‫ﻃﻮﻳﻼ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻧﻬﺎ‬‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ‬‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺁﻥ ﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻓﺊ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺮﺩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﻌﻴﻒ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬‫ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺼﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬‫ﺑﻘﻊ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺼﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬‫ً‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻋﻄﻼ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫•‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ‬‫‪ .Olympus‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﺍﻵﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬‫ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺘﻴﻦ‬‫ﻗﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ً‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺭﺣﻠﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪،‬‬‫ﺍﺷﺘﺮ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﺮ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬‫ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ‬‫ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﻘﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫•‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬‫ﺧﻴﺎﻻﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ‬‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻏﻄﺎء‬‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻜﺎ ًﻧﺎ‬‫ً‬‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺜﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻔﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺎﺭ ًﺩﺍ‬‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬‫ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻮﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻭﻳﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﺝ‬‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬‫‪115 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻏﻤﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺷﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ –‪ 10‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫–‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺃﻱ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬‫ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬‫ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻻ‬‫ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ‬‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻴﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ‬‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ‪.‬‬‫• ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 116‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﺿﻌﺔ‬‫ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﺳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻌﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬‫ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻲ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬‫ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ‬‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء‬‫ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ‬‫ﺇﺫﻥ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺤﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬‫ﻭﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ‬‫ﻧﻮﺻﻴﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ‬‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ‬‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬‫ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻼء ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‬‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "CE‬ﻣﻌﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ]ﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻬﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻌﺠﻞ ﻣﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺧﻄﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻌﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ‪ 2006/66/EC‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ [2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﻭﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪Olympus‬‬‫‪ Europa Holding GmbH‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،http://www.olympus.com :‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻖ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﺮﺍءﻯ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺤﻖ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ‪Olympus‬‬‫‪ Europa Holding GmbH‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ .http://www.olympus.com :‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ‬‫ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ‬‫ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫‪،OLYMPUS IMAGING CORP., Shinjuku Monolith, 2-3-1 Nishi-Shinjuku, Shinjuku-ku, Tokyo 163-0914" 1‬‬‫ﺗﻤﻨﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﺎ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻤﻴًﺎ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ Olympus‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ‬‫ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻭﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‬‫ﻭﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ .Olympus‬ﻭﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺜﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺤﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ‬‫ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻬﻼﻛﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫‪ 2‬ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻓﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﻟﻴﻒ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬‫‪12‬‬‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫)ﺃ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺳﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬‫)ﺏ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬‫‪.Olympus‬‬‫)ﺝ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺻﻄﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺩ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻟﺰﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻀﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺎﻋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺍﺭﺙ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻮﺙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻲ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﻈﻤﺔ‪.‬‬‫)ﻫـ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻹﻫﻤﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻃﺎﺭﺩﺍﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺘﺎﻟﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ( ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫)ﻭ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬‫)ﺯ( ﺃﻱ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﺡ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬‫)ﻁ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺷﻬﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ‪.‬‬‫)ﻱ( ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪.‬‬‫‪ 3‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻘﻂ؛ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬‫‪ 4‬ﺳﺘﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻔﻲ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‪،‬‬‫ﻋﻦ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺮﺭ‬‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻔﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬‫‪117 AR‬‬‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬‫‪ 1‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻛﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻞء ﺍﺳﻤﻚ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﻮﺭﺓ‬‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ٍ‬‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ )ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ( ﺑﺸﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺤﻘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬‫ﺭﻓﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ‬‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪2‬‬‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ‪.‬‬‫ً‬‫• ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ http://www.olympus.com :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪Olympus‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ‪.‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫‪ IBM‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.International Business Machines Corporation‬‬‫‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭﻳﻦ ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi, Inc‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ‪.Apical Limited‬‬‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻨﻴﺎﺕ‬‫ّ‬‫• ‪ AVCHD‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ AVCHD‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺘﻲ ‪ Sony‬ﻭ ‪.Panasonic‬‬‫• ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺑﺘﺮﺧﻴﺺ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻣﻦ ‪ Dolby .Dolby Laboratories‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ D‬ﺍﻟﺜﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻜﻬﺎ‬‫‪.Dolby Laboratories‬‬‫• ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HI‬‬

‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬‫‪12‬‬‫‪AR 118‬‬‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Micro Four Thirds‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬‫‪ OLYMPUS IMAGING Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺑﻲ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ‪.‬‬‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ PENPAL‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ DCF/‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺺ‬‫ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )‪.(JEITA‬‬‫‪THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE‬‬‫‪PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN‬‬‫‪COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO‬‬‫‪THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL‬‬‫‪ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC‬‬‫‪VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL‬‬‫‪INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM‬‬‫ﻣﺬﻛﺮﺓ‬‫‪119 AR‬‬‫ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪f2.0 12mm M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED‬‬‫‪f2.8 17mm M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪f1.8 45mm M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪R II 5.6-42mm f3.5-14 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL‬‬‫‪5.6-18mm f4.0-9 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED‬‬‫‪5.6-150mm f4.0-14 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED‬‬‫‪R 5.6-150mm f4.0-40 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED‬‬‫‪6.7-300mm f4.8-75 M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED‬‬‫‪FCON-P01‬‬‫‪Fisheye‬‬‫‪MMF-2‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫‪WCON-P01‬‬‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪OM‬‬‫‪MCON-P01‬‬‫‪MF-2‬‬‫*‪1‬‬‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪Four Thirds‬‬‫*‪1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪2 OM‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬‫‪FL-300R‬‬‫‪FL-36R‬‬‫‪FL-50R‬‬‫‪FL-14‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫‪STF-22‬‬‫‪TF-22‬‬‫‪SRF-11‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫‪RF-11‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫‪FC-1‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬‫*‪2‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫*‪ 1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪.OM‬‬‫*‪ 2‬ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻤﻲ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ OLYMPUS PENPAL‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ً .‬‬‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﻟﻌﻘﻮﺑﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 4‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬‫‪AR 120‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪E-P3‬‬‫‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ‬‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻀﻞ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻭﻳﺐ ‪.Olympus‬‬‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬‫‪VF-2‬‬‫‪VF-1‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ‬‫*‪4‬‬‫‪BCS-5/BCS-1‬‬‫‪BLS-5/BLS-1‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪Li-ion‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪Li-ion‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ‬‫‪RM-UC1‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ‪ /‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ‬‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬‫*‪5‬‬‫‪MCG-2/MCG-1‬‬‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻛﺘﻒ‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪/MFT‬‬‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺔ ‪/PEN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ‪PEN‬‬‫‪SEMA-1‬‬
‫‪R‬‬

‫‪L‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬‫‪MAL-1‬‬‫ﺿﻮء ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻛﺮﻭ‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪/USB‬‬‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬‫‪/SD‬‬‫‪/SDHC‬‬‫‪/SDXC‬‬‫*‪6‬‬‫‪Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬‫‪OLYMPUS PENPAL‬‬‫*‪3‬‬‫‪PP-1‬‬‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬‫‪[ib] / OLYMPUS Viewer‬‬‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬‫*‪ 5‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻛﺴﺴﻮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺘﻚ‪.‬‬‫*‪ 6‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬‫‪121 AR‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬86 ................................................ K Set
88 ............................. : Warning Level
89 ................................................ R REC
41 ................(‫ )ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬B
16 .........................(‫ ) ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ‬ART
17 .................................. (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‬SCN
61 ...................................... (‫ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬n
64 ،14 .....................(‫ )ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‬U
63 ...................................(‫ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬G
15 ...........................................(‫ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬0
90 ،72 ................................ Address Book
57 ................................................AE BKT
84 .......................................AEL Metering
89 ،88 ،82.................................. AEL/AFL
82 ................................... AEL/AFL Memo
37 ................................................AF Area
90 .............................. Album Mem. Setup
90 ............................. Album Mem. Usage
85 ................................................All >65 .............................................. All Erase
84 ..................................... Anti-Shock z
58 ............................................. ART BKT
83 ...................................... ART LV Mode
67 ..................................................Aspect
46 ........................................... B&W Filter
89 ،84 ....................................Backlit LCD
66 .................................................... BGM
67 ...................................... Black & White
57 ............................................Bracketing
81 ......................................Bulb Focusing
84 ........................................... Bulb Timer
82 ................................... Button Function
36 .......................... (‫ )ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬C-AF
36 .................. (‫ )ﺗﻌﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬C-AF+TR
99 ،65 .................................... Card Setup
85 .........................................Color Space
46 ............................................... Contrast
72 ............................................... Copy All
87 ............................... Copyright Settings
45 ........................................... Custom K
82 ....................................... Dial Direction‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬107 ................................... 1 ‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬W
107 ................................... 2 ‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬X
107 ...............................‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬q
108 ،80 ................................... ‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬d108 ،81 ............................‫ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬c
100 ،90 ......................... ‫ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺯﻡ‬#81 ............................................. R AF/MF
82 ...................................... S Button/Dial
83 ...........................................T Release
83 .....................................U Disp/8/PC
84 .....................................V Exp/p/ISO
85 .......................................W # Custom
85 ..................................X K/Color/WB
86 ..................................Y Record/Erase
87 .............................................. Z Movie
88 .........................................b K Utility
90 ............. A OLYMPUS PENPAL Share
90 .............B OLYMPUS PENPAL Album
90 ...................... C Electronic Viewfinder
47 ................................................. (‫ )ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬Y86 ،47 ........................................ (‫ )ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬X
86 ،47 .........................................(‫ )ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‬W
93 .........................................RC Mode #65 ....................................................... R
80 ................................... (‫ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬W
81 ،80 .......................c/# Menu Display
89 ........................................... P Home
82 .....................................P Set Home
81 ..........................................P Set Up82 ،39 ............................. I Face Priority
82 ................................................ d Lock83 .................................. G/Info Settings
83 .............................K Control Settings
84 ..............................q Close Up Mode84 ......................................(‫ )ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬885 ........................................Slow Limit #85 ........................................... .X-Sync #85 ................................................. w+F
85 ......................... W Keep Warm Color
85 ................................................. WB+#

AR 122

62 ........................................... Movie Play87 ،62 ..........................................Movie R
92 ،87 ..................................... Movie+Still
75 ..................................................... MTP
56 ..........................Multiple Exposure a
45 ............................................. Muted Z
90 ...................... My OLYMPUS PENPAL
89 ،35 ............................................. Myset
45 ............................................ Natural j
85 .......................................... Noise Filter
85 ...................................... .Noise Reduct
83 ،69 .............................................NTSC
90 ،71 ...................... OLYMPUS PENPAL
83 ،69 ................................................ PAL
54 ............................................ Panorama
46 .............................................Pict. Tone
77 ............................................ PictBridge
90 ................................ Picture Copy Size
45 ....................................... Picture Mode
83 ......................... Picture Mode Settings
90 ................................ Picture Send Size
86 .......................................... Pixel Count
98 ...................................... Pixel Mapping
90 ،71 ................................... Please Wait
45 ............................................ Portrait a
51 ................................................Preview
77 ..................................................... Print
87 ........................................... Priority Set
86 ......................................... Quick Erase
47 .................................................... RAW
67 .................................... RAW Data Edit
89 .............................................. RAW K
86 .............................. RAW+JPEG Erase
80 ...........................................REC VIEW
67 .......................................... Redeye Fix
81 .......................................... Reset Lens
90 ،65 .................................Reset Protect
35 .........................................Reset/Myset
83 ........................................Rls Priority C
83 ........................................Rls Priority S
65 .................................................. Rotate
36 ...................... (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬S-AF
36 ............................................. S-AF+MF
67 ،46 ...................................... Saturation

123 AR

82 ........................................Dial Function
87 ............................................dpi Setting
87 .......................................Edit Filename
46 ................................................... Effect
67 ..............................................e-Portrait
84 ............................................... EV Step
90 ...........................................EVF Adjust
88 ..................................... Exposure Shift
88 .................................................. Eye-Fi
86 ............................................ File Name
80 ..............................................Firmware
58 ................................................ FL BKT
82 .......................................... Focus Ring
99 ................................................. Format
81 ......................................... Full-time AF
46 .............................................Gradation
48 ....................................................... HD
46 .............................................. High Key
83 .............................. Histogram Settings
45 ....................................... i-Enhance h
48 .......................................Image Aspect
68 ..................................... Image Overlay
42 ............................. Image Stabilizer o
84 .................................................Info Off
89 ............................................... IS Mode
42 ...................................... (‫ )ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬o84 ،48 ................................................ ISO
58 .............................................. ISO BKT
84 .............................................. ISO Step
84 ..............................................ISO-Auto
84 ....................................... ISO-Auto Set
47 ................................................... JPEG
67 ............................................ JPEG Edit
88 ......................................... Level Adjust
32 ........................................ Level Gauge
20 ......................................... Live Control
18 ........................................... Live Guide
83 ................................... Live View Boost
46 ...............................................Low Key
41 ...............................................Metering
89 ،36 ............................. (‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬MF
82 ............................................. MF Assist
83 ......................................... Mode Guide
45 ........................................Monotone J‫‪48 ........................................................SD‬‬‫‪67 ................................................... Sepia‬‬‫‪85 .....................................Shading Comp‬‬‫‪67 ..........................................Shadow Adj‬‬‫‪46 ........................................... Sharpness‬‬‫‪84 ................................................... Sleep‬‬‫‪66 .....................................................Slide‬‬‫‪75 ................................................ Storage‬‬‫‪89 ..........................................Test Picture‬‬‫‪88 .........................Touch Screen Settings‬‬‫‪84 ........................................... USB Mode‬‬‫‪83 .............................................Video Out‬‬‫‪45 ................................................Vivid i‬‬‫‪84 .................................................Volume‬‬‫‪85 ،43 .................................................WB‬‬‫‪57 ...............................................WB BKT‬‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪10 ..................................‬‬‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪68 ................... R‬‬‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪69 ................................‬‬‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪59 ........................................ $‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪100 ،6 ،3.........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪99 ،4 .................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪40 ،34 ............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪60 ............................ w‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪94 ،36 ،12...............................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )‪36 ......................(C-AF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪38 .................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪36 ................................... (MF‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪2nd/SLOW2#‬‬‫‪59 .........................................CURTAIN‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺬﻳﺐ ‪79 ،67 ........................................P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ‪49 ............................ o‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺮﻣﺞ ‪50 ..................................... P‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ‪49 ................................. j‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪53 ......................................M‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪52 ................. S‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪53 .................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪51 .................... A‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪34 ،33 ،32 ،9 ............................INFO‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ‪78 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪77 ..........................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪100 ،5 ...............................................‬‬‫‪AR 124‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪40 ،32 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪59 .....................................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪59 ............................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪33 ،32 .....................................‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ‪59 ........ SLOW#‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ(‪/‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء !‪59 ............................. SLOW‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪79 ................................... p‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪46 ........................................ Y‬‬‫ﺏ‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ‪114 ،100 ،3 ........................‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪99 ،4 ....................................... Eye-Fi‬‬‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪99 ،4 ...................... SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )‪36 ...........................(S-AF‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪18 ،11 ،10 ...................A iAUTO‬‬‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪61 ،13 .................................n‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ‪40 ......................... F‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ >‪44 ..................‬‬‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪43 .......................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ! ‪50 ......................................‬‬‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪67 ........................................ Q‬‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪98 ،6 ...........................................‬‬‫ﺡ‬‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ < ‪76 ........................................‬‬‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪47 ..............................................‬‬‫ﺱ‬‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪53 ،52 ،12..............................‬‬‫ﺵ‬‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ‪100 ،3 .................................‬‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺲ ‪22 ،9 ............................................‬‬‫ﺽ‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪7 ................................. X‬‬‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪80 ............................... s‬‬‫ﻉ‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻴﺔ‪102 .........................................‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪100 .........................Four Thirds‬‬‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪100 ............... Micro Four Thirds‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻴﻠﻲ‪-‬ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪58 ...............................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻮﻳﻢ ‪63 .............................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪38 ..................................‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪66 .....................................m‬‬‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪33 ،32 ..................................‬‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪107 ،47 ..............................K‬‬‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪59 ......................................... #‬‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪105 .................................... Super FP‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ! ‪59 ..................‬‬‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء ‪59 ...........................................#‬‬‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪37 ................................................‬‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ‪ ESP‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ‪41 ................................ G‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪41 ......................................... I‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬‫‪41 ................................................IHI‬‬‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ‪41 ................. ISH‬‬‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪53 ،51 ،12.............................‬‬‫ﻙ‬‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪37 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪91 ........................................‬‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ‪39 ....................H‬‬‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪37 ...........................................‬‬‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪102 ...............................‬‬‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ‪15 .................................... D‬‬‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪82 .........................‬‬‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪47 ..............................................‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪43 ..............................WB‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪43 ..............CWB‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪44 ،43 ......... V‬‬‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪43 ..............................‬‬‫ﻥ‬‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ‪81 ،36 ..........................................‬‬‫ﻫـ‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪37 ............................. P‬‬‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪37 ................................................‬‬‫‪125 AR‬‬http://www.olympus.com/

OLYMPUS EUROPA HOLDING GMBH
Consumer Product Division
Wendenstrasse 14 – 18, 20097 Hamburg, Germany
Tel.:+49 40 - 23 77 30- / Fax: +49 40 - 23 07 61
Bredowstrasse 20, 22113 Hamburg, Germany
Postfach 10 49 08, 20034 Hamburg, Germany
http://www.olympus-europa.com
00800 - 67 10 83 00.+800.+49 40 - 237 73 48 99
ً

Syria

Bayan Co. For Digital Electronics.
Bahsah, Golden Tower Hotel Bld. Floor 7 & 8,
Damascus Syria
Tel :(963) 11-231 6191
Fax :(963) 11-231 7361
E-mail :albayan@scs-net.org

Magnet S.A.L.
P.O.Box 110-773, Beirut Lebanon
Lebanon
Digital Camera
Tel : (961) 01-512 003

Saudi
ArabiaSamir Photographic Supplies (Jeddah)
Hindi Bluilding. Mandina Road Kilo 14,
P.O.Box 559, Jeddah 21421 Saudi Arabia
Tel : (966) 2-682 8219

KuwaitQirtas & Gajria Co., Ltd. (W.L.L.)
Sheikh Bader Al Salem Malek Al Sabah
Building, Office No. 12 & 13, New Street,
Kuwait City, State of Kuwait
Tel : (965) 241 4728 / (965) 240 8053

2011

+49 180 5 - 67 10 83ًً

BahrainGagria Electronics W.L.L.
P.O.Box 305, Manama Bahrain
Tel :(973) 17-555 616 / (973) 17-555 626
Fax :(973) 17-556 110

UAE

Al Sayegh Imaging & Photography
Equipment LLC.
P.O.Box 55106, Dubai U.A.E.
Tel : (971) 4-266 3200
Fax :(971) 4–266 9964
E-mail :olympus.service@aisa-g.com

Oman

Shah Nagardas Manji & Co
P.O.Box 2908, Ruwi-112, Sultanateof OmanTel : (968) 2470 2772
Fax :(968) 2479-7228

Egypt

Optoscient
10, 26th July Street
11518 Cairo Tel. +20 2 239 14 883
Fax +20 2 239 144 66
e-mail: info@optoscient.com

VR729701